2005 Saturn L-Series Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
“Do Not let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or
in different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Six-Way Power Driver Seat
Front Seats
Manual Passenger Seat
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
The control is located on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat. To adjust the seat do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by pressing
the center switch forward or rearward.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
• Move the entire seat up or down by pressing the
DOWN/UP switch.
• Adjust the seatback by pressing the RECLINE
switch forward or rearward.
information.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has this
feature, the knob is
located on the inboard
side of the driver’s
seatback.
Turn the knob forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support.
To adjust the seatback on a manual seat, lift the lever
on the outer side of the seat and move the seatback
to where you want it. Then release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On a power driver’s seat,
adjust the seatback by
pressing the RECLINE
switch forward or rearward.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Your vehicle has adjustable head restraints on the front
seats. Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down
so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top
of your head. This position reduces the chance of
neck injury in a crash.
The adjustable head restraints tilt forward and
rearward also.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
{CAUTION:
Split Folding Rear Seat
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
Your vehicle is equipped with a split folding rear seat.
This feature enables you to carry long cargo by
folding down part or all of the rear seat.
You can fold either side of the seatback separately or
both sides together.
Lift the lever on the top of
the seatback. Make sure
the front seat is not
reclined. If it is, the rear
seatback will not fold down
all the way.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To raise the seatback, pull up the seatback until it
latches. Push and pull the top of the seatback to ensure
that it is securely latched.
Pull the seatback down.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to. If the belt is
page 1-26
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
To move it down, press
down on the indented part
of the height adjuster
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position. You can move the
adjuster up just by
pushing up on the bottom
of the height adjuster.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to
move it down without pressing down on the indented
part to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All of the rear seating positions of the sedan and the
rear outside seating positions of the wagon have
lap-shoulder belts. Here is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
If you would like to have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides installed on your vehicle, contact your retailer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each outside passenger
position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt
comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints
and booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort
guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here is
how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of elastic cord exposed.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts. If you have the choice,
a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear
a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
is sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt
still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash
the child’s upper body would have the restraint that
belts provide.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible
to hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240-lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in
a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so
the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in
a rear seat.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system
or the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce
the chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with
the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We, therefore, recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat. Here is why:
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always
to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires
that the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a
kit is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in
use an anchor point located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Your vehicle has top strap anchors installed for the rear
seating positions only.
Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the
right front passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top strap must be anchored. There is no place
to anchor the top strap in this position.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
The top strap anchors are
located behind the rear
seat on the filler panel. In
order to get to one of these
brackets, you will have to
open the trim cover. The
trim cover is marked with
the symbol for child seat
top tether anchor.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors for all three rear seating positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating the
lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each
seating position with the
LATCH system has a label
on the seatback at each
lower anchor position.
The labels are located near the base of all three rear
seating positions.
{CAUTION:
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed Securing a Child Restraint in a
for the LATCH System
Rear Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
on page 1-37 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the
LATCH anchorages.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
on page 1-37 if the child restraint has one.
There is no top strap anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here is why:
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. You may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has four airbags:
{CAUTION:
• A frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal
airbag for the right front passenger,
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts but do not replace them.
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and passenger directly behind the driver, and
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger and the person seated directly behind
that passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating airbag. But these
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
airbags have provided in the past.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
The side impact airbags are designed to inflate
only in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
They are not designed to inflate in frontal, in
rollover or in rear crashes.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
Where Are the Airbags?
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The side impact airbag for the driver and the person
seated directly behind the driver is located in the ceiling
above the side windows.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, because your vehicle
has side impact airbags, never secure anything
to the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope
or tiedown through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an inflating side
impact airbag will be blocked. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear.
The side impact airbag for the right front passenger and
the person seated directly behind that passenger is
located in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at a
different crash speed than if the object does not
deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level is about
9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). (The threshold level can
vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can
be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle
strikes something that will move or deform, such as a
parked car, the threshold level will be higher.)
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
likely help the occupant. A side impact airbag will
only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag, and related
hardware are all part of the airbag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger. For vehicles with side impact
airbags, the airbag modules are located in the ceiling of
the vehicle, near the side windows.
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact airbag.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the ceiling
of your vehicle near the side windows will be hot. The
parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can not get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior dome lamp on and flash
the daytime running lights on and off when the airbags
inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock the
doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using the
door lock and interior lamp controls. You must first turn
your ignition key to the following ignition switch positions:
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
2. Turn the ignition key to RUN.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side
windows, the airbag may not work properly. You
may have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, or side impact airbag module and ceiling
covering for the roof-mounted side impact airbag.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are airbag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate
while someone is working on your vehicle. Your retailer
and the Saturn Service Manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
retailer for service.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restraint System Check
{CAUTION:
Checking Your Restraint Systems
For up to one minute after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped
with yellow tape, yellow coverings, or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag systems. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If your seat adjuster will not work after a crash, the
special part of the safety belt that goes through the seat
to the adjuster may need to be replaced.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part about the airbag system
earlier in this manual.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
One key is used for the ignition and all of the locks.
Key code information can be obtained only at the retailer
where your vehicle was purchased. These code
numbers can be used to make new keys. Additional
keys that are needed can be made at any retail service
facility provided you have the key code information.
Store this information in a safe place, but not in
your vehicle.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Have extra keys made. Your service parts department
can make extra keys for you.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry System
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
The remote keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
• Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement” and “Resynchronization” under
page 2-4.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If you are still having trouble, see your Saturn
retailer or authorized service provider for service.
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
K (Unlock): Press this button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter to unlock the driver’s door. This
also disarms the theft-deterrent system. See
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
“Theft-Deterrent System” following for information on
disarming the theft-deterrent system. Press the button
again within 5 seconds to unlock the rest of the doors.
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the doors or
the trunk from about 26 feet (8 m) away using the
remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your
vehicle.
L(Panic Alarm): Press the button with the horn
symbol when the ignition is turned off. The horn
will sound and the parking lamps and dome lamp will
flash for up to two minutes. To stop the panic alarm,
press this button again.
Q (Lock): Press this
button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter
to lock the doors.
This also arms the
V (Trunk): Press this button to open the trunk or
liftgate. The trunk or liftgate will not open when this
button is pressed if the vehicle is moving.
theft-deterrent system. See
“Theft-Deterrent System”
following for information on
arming the theft-deterrent
system.
Theft-Deterrent System
The remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
arm/disarm the theft-deterrent system. Your vehicle’s
theft-deterrent system can be programmed to three
different modes.
Your vehicle can be programmed so that the parking
lamps will flash and/or the horn will sound when you lock
the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
See your retailer for more information on programming
this feature.
Active Arming: The system will arm when the lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed. The system will disarm when the unlock button
is pressed.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passive Arming: The system will arm itself one minute
after the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door
has been opened and closed. If the lock button on the
transmitter is pressed before the minute has passed, the
system will arm immediately. The system will disarm
when the unlock button is pressed.
If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering/exiting
the vehicle, you can shut it off by pressing any button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter other than
the panic alarm button.
If you hear three horn chirps when you press the unlock
button on the transmitter, that means the vehicle’s
alarm was triggered while you were away.
Security System Disable: The system will not arm.
To change the mode that your vehicle is programmed to,
do the following:
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your retailer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your retailer. When the retailer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your retailer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
2. Press the panic alarm button on the transmitter
slowly four times within five seconds.
3. You must complete one of the following within three
seconds to change the mode.
• To select the active arming mode, press the lock
button on the transmitter.
• To select the passive arming mode, press the
trunk release button on the transmitter.
• To select the security system disable mode,
press the unlock button on the transmitter.
A chime will sound once the mode has been selected.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil or
similar object to remove the old battery. Do not use
a metal object.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
3. Insert the new battery as the instructions under the
cover indicate.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
If the transmitter does not work, try synchronizing your
transmitter with your receiver. See “Resynchronization”
for more information.
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the transmitter.
Resynchronization
This is used to keep the transmitter of the vehicle
communicating with the receiver of the vehicle.
Resynchronization may be required due to the security
method used by this system.
Your vehicle has an automatic resynchronization
function built into the system. If your transmitter is not
working properly and you have to manually
resynchronize, press the lock and unlock buttons at the
same time for seven seconds while you are near
your vehicle. The doors will lock or unlock, depending
on their starting position. If they do not, contact
your retailer for service.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the outside, you can use your door key to lock
or unlock a front door.
Door Locks
To manually lock or unlock
the door from the inside,
move the door lock
pin on the door down or
up. The unlocked door
indicator on the door pin
will be hidden when
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
the door is locked.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The delayed locking feature can be overridden by
pressing the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, or the door lock switch, a second time. The
doors will lock immediately and when all doors are closed
the theft-deterrent system will arm after 30 seconds.
Power Door Locks
Press the bottom half of
the switch on either front
door to lock all of the
doors. Push the top half of
the switch to unlock all
of the doors. The unlocked
door indicators on the
manual door lock pins will
be hidden when the
To get the horn to chirp if a door was open during the
arming process, you must press the lock button on your
transmitter twice after the doors are closed.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
doors are locked.
With this feature, all the doors will lock as the transaxle is
shifted out of PARK (P) if the ignition key is in RUN and
all doors are closed. The doors will automatically lock if
the vehicle is going faster than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Delayed Locking
In the following two situations, when a door is opened,
all doors will lock again:
A chime will sound three times to indicate a door is
open when you try to lock the doors with the remote
keyless entry transmitter or the power door lock switch.
The doors will not lock, and the theft-deterrent system
will not arm until all the doors are closed and five
seconds have passed.
• The brake pedal is applied, a door is opened and
then closed, and the brake pedal is released.
• A door is opened and closed without the brake
pedal applied while the vehicle is moving faster than
3 mph (5 km/h).
When programmed, all doors will unlock when the key
is removed from the ignition.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The programmable unlocking feature can be
To set the secondary locks, do the following:
programmed on or off by turning the ignition key to
RUN and pressing the unlock power door lock switch for
eight seconds. The horn will chirp once when this
feature is on and will chirp twice when it is off.
1. Insert the key into the lock next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it clockwise for the
driver’s side and counterclockwise for the
passenger’s side.
2. Close the door.
Rear Door Security Locks
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch, or
by lifting the rear door manual lock.
The rear door security locks
are located on the inside
edge of each rear door.
You must open the rear
doors to access them.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it counterclockwise for the
driver’s side and clockwise for the passenger’s side.
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and only the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure
to remove the key from the ignition when locking your
vehicle.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk Lid Release
Trunk
To open the trunk from
inside your vehicle, push
the trunk release button
located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
To open the trunk from outside of your vehicle you may
either insert the key into the lock cylinder and turn
the key clockwise, or press the trunk release button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System in the Index.
Your trunk release button will not function if the vehicle
is moving.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Pull the t-shaped trunk release handle straight back to
open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle located
inside the trunk near the bottom edge of the trunk lid.
This handle will glow following exposure to light.
Trap-Resistant Trunk Kit
To help prevent a child from becoming trapped in your
trunk, you can order a trap-resistant trunk kit from
your retailer. This kit includes:
• A modified trunk latch.
• A lighted release handle.
See your retailer for additional information.
Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk may damage it. Use the
emergency trunk release handle only to help you
open the trunk lid.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Manual Windows
If your vehicle has manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power windows can operate only when the ignition
key is to RUN or ACC.
Power Windows
A rear window switch is located on each rear door.
Press the bottom half of the switch to open the window
and the top to close it.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that is labeled AUTO. Press the switch all the
way down and hold it there momentarily, and the driver’s
window will go all the way down. To stop the automatic
function, lift the switch all the way up and release it.
The switches are located on each side of the shift lever
on the console. To open a window press the switch
down and to close a window, lift up.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Window Lock Out
Theft-Deterrent Systems
The driver’s window controls also include a lock-out
switch. Press the window lock switch to the left to stop
rear passengers from using their window switches.
The driver can still control all the windows with the lock
on. Press the right side of the window lock button to
return to normal window operation.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Passlock®
Sun Visors
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Passlock® theft-deterrent system.
To block out glare swing the visors down or to the side.
This light is located on the
instrument panel cluster
and will come on for
the Passlock®
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors. Some
models have illuminated visor vanity mirrors for the driver
only or for the driver and right front passenger. When you
lift the cover the light will automatically come on, even
when the ignition is off.
theft-deterent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the
ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
During normal operation, the security light will go off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN following an engine start.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from START
as soon as the engine starts.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at
this time. You may also want to check the fuses,
retailer for service. Also, see Roadside Assistance
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your
new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard
stops with new linings can mean premature
wear and earlier replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every time you get new
brake linings.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACC (Accessory): This is the position in which you
can operate your electrical accessories. With the key in
this position, the ignition and automatic transaxle will
unlock. Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed
or towed.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn the
switch to four positions.
RUN: This is the position for driving to which the switch
returns after you start the engine and release the
switch. The switch stays in RUN when the engine is
running. But even when the engine is not running, you
can use RUN to operate your electrical accessories
and to display some instrument panel cluster messages
and warning lights.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to RUN for normal driving.
OFF: This is the only position from which you can
remove the key.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your engine has run for about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not
race your engine when it is cold.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This time keep the pedal down for five or six
seconds to clear the extra gasoline from the engine.
After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the normal
starting procedure.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the
engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, hold
your key in START for about 10 seconds at a time
until the engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle,
the shift lever is located on the console between
the seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several positions
for the shift lever.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
page 2-23. If you are pulling a trailer, see
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift
lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
ease pressure on the shift lever — push the shift lever all
the way into PARK (P) and also release the shift lever
button as you maintain brake application. Then move the
shift lever into the gear you wish. Press the shift lever
button before moving the shift lever. See Shifting Out of
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting
your vehicle.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
page 4-30.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving with the automatic transaxle. If you need
more power for passing, and you are:
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power, but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transaxle. Also, shifting into
SECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator all the way down.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go
faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle
system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have
your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you can
use SECOND (2) when you are driving less than
35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher speeds.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some
times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When going down a steep hill.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lift up and forward to
disengage.
Shift Lock Release
If you ever hold the brake pedal down, but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition to OFF and remove the key.
4. While maintaining brake application, pull up and
hold the white lever and then move the shift lever
into the desired gear position.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
2. Carefully pry the shift lock override cover from the
floor shift console.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the
button in as you move the parking brake lever all the
way down.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your foot and pull up on the parking brake
lever located between the seats. If the ignition is on, the
brake system warning light on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-27.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
page 4-40.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button. If you can, it means that the shift lever
was not fully locked into PARK (P).
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-23.
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transaxle
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P), while pressing the button on the shift
lever and maintaining brake application. Then move the
shift lever into the gear you wish.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have your vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
{CAUTION:
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Mirrors
If the vehicle has this
Manual Rearview Mirror
feature, the outside power
mirror control is located
on the driver’s door.
If the vehicle has this mirror, while sitting in a
comfortable driving position, adjust the mirror so you
can see clearly behind the vehicle. Grip the mirror in the
center to move it up or down and side to side. The
day/night adjustment, located at the bottom of the mirror,
allows adjustment to lessen glare from the lamps
behind you. Pull the lever for daytime use; push it for
night use.
Outside Remote Control Mirror
If the vehicle has this feature, adjust the driver’s side
outside mirror to the desired direction by moving
the control, located on the driver’s door. To adjust the
passenger’s side outside mirror, move the control
located on the passenger’s door. Adjust each mirror so
that the driver can see the side of the vehicle and
the area beside and behind it.
Use the selector switch located above the round touch
pad to choose either the driver’s or passenger’s
outside mirror. To adjust the mirror press the round
touch pad in the desired direction.
Adjust each mirror so that the side of the vehicle and
the area beside and behind it are visible while sitting in a
comfortable driving position.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Convex Mirror
Outside Heated Mirrors
When the rear window defogger is turned on, it also
warms both outside rearview mirrors to help clear them
of ice, snow, or condensation. See Climate Control
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. The glove
box has a light inside.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver’s seat. It also makes things appear farther
away than they really are.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle is equipped with a center console.
To open the console’s storage area, pull up on the
latch located in the front of the console lid.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the sunroof three-quarters of the way, press
and hold the SLIDE portion of the switch. To open
the sunroof all the way, press and hold the SLIDE
portion of the switch again. To close the sunroof, press
and hold the TILT portion of the switch.
Assist Handles
A handle above the front passenger’s door and both
rear doors can be used when getting in and out of your
vehicle. The assist handle provides assistance, but
should not be used to support all or even a substantial
portion of a person’s weight.
To place the sunroof in the vent position when the
sunroof is closed, press and hold the TILT portion of the
switch. The rear of the sunroof will be raised to
provide ventilation. To close the sunroof from the vent
position, press and hold the SLIDE portion of the switch.
Sunroof
If your vehicle has this
feature, the switch will be
located above your
rearview mirror. Your
ignition key must be in the
RUN or ACC position to
operate the sunroof.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
on page 3-15.
on page 3-18.
page 3-15.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
near the center of the
instrument panel.
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
To tilt the wheel, hold the
wheel and pull the lever.
Then, move the wheel to a
comfortable position and
release the lever to
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
lock the wheel in place.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has an upward (for right) and a
downward (for left) position. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• Turn and Lane-Change Signals
• Headlamps
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
the lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
• Flash-to-Pass Feature
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Washer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or
high beam to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way
towards you. Then release it.
{CAUTION:
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you to operate
the windshield wipers. Washer fluid will squirt onto
the windshield and the wipers will run for a few cycles
to clear the windshield. For more wash cycles, pull
the lever toward you and hold it there.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9: Put the lever in this position to turn off the wipers.
Windshield Wiper Lever
&: Put the lever in this position to set a delay
between wipes. Turn the band on the lever to set the
length of the delay (1, 2, or 3).
OO: Put the lever in this position for slow, steady
wiping cycles.
OOOO: Put the lever in this position for rapid
wiping cycles.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or blade inserts.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
8: Pull the lever down and release it for a single
wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original position.
For more cycles, hold the lever down before releasing it.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise Control
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
The buttons for the cruise control are located on the
steering wheel.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
IO(Cruise On/Off): Push this button to turn the
system on and off.
IS (Resume/Accelerate): Push this button to
make the vehicle resume a previously set speed or to
accelerate when cruise is already active.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control
you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise
control back on.
– (Set/Coast): Press this button to set the speed or to
decrease the speed when cruise is already active.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can press the cruise control resume/accelerate
button.
Setting Cruise Control
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
{CAUTION:
If you hold the resume/accelerate button the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the button
or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
do not hold the resume/accelerate button.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
1. Press the cruise on/off button. The indicator light
will come on briefly.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set/coast button, then release the
button and the accelerator pedal. You will now
cruise at the higher speed.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the set/coast button.
• Press the resume/accelerate button. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed you want, and then
release the button. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, press the button briefly.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you do not need
to reset it.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Applying the
brake or shifting into a lower gear will take you out
of cruise control. If you need to apply the brake or shift
to a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill
slope, you may not want to attempt to use your cruise
control feature.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press set/coast button until you reach the lower
speed you want, then release it.
Ending Cruise Control
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set/coast button. Each time you do this, you
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Stepping on the brake will end the current cruise control
session only. Press the cruise on/off button to turn off
the system completely.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
53 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
turn signal/multifunction lever.
Lamps On Reminder
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the following four
positions:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
put the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon
how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness in daylight when
the following conditions are met:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• The ignition is on,
• the exterior lamp band is in the AUTO position,
• the transaxle is not in PARK (P),
• the light sensor determines it is daytime, and
• the parking brake is released.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlamps will be
on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker
and other lamps will not be on. The instrument panel will
not be lit up either.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the headlamps will
come on automatically.
When you turn the exterior lamp band to the headlamp
position, your low-beam headlamps will come on.
The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will
also come on.
Your vehicle has a light
sensor located on top of
the instrument panel. Make
sure it is not covered, or
the headlamps will be
on when you don’t need
them.
When you turn off the headlamps, the regular lamps will
go off, and your low-beam headlamps will come on to
the reduced brightness.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move the shift
lever to PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until you move
the shift lever out of PARK (P).
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
If your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lamps for
better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The button for your fog
lamps is located in the
instrument panel above
the radio.
The thumbwheel for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering column.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off.
Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the lights or down
to dim them.
When using fog lamps, the parking lamps or low-beam
headlamps must be on.
A light on the button will come on when the fog lamps
are actually on. Fog lamps will go off whenever the
high-beam headlamps come on. When the high-beam
headlamps go off, the fog lamps will come on again.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamp
Map Lamps
The dome lamp switch has three positions.
Your vehicle may have map lamps on the rearview
mirror. Press the button next to the lamp to turn it on
and off.
ON: The lamp will stay on as long as the switch is in
this position.
DOOR: The lamp will come on when a door is opened.
See “Entry Lighting” for more information.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery saver feature
designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.
OFF: The lamp will not come on as long as the switch
is in this position.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system will
automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes.
Entry Lighting
If the dome lamp is in the DOOR position, the lamps
inside your vehicle will come on when any door is
opened. In addition, the light will come on when the
remote keyless entry unlock button is pressed. It
will stay on for 20 seconds or until a door is opened.
After the door is opened the light will remain on and
stay on for 20 seconds after the doors are closed,
or until you put the key in the ignition and turn the key
to RUN. The light will then gradually dim until it is
no longer lit.
Accessory Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
CB radio.
The accessory power outlets are located in the front
and rear of the center console.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, just push it in all the way and let
go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not
use anything other than the cigarette lighter in the
heating element.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
To remove the ashtray, lift it straight up. To reinstall it,
press the ashtray down firmly until it is fully seated.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, and then directs most of
the remaining air to the floor outlets. Some air may be
directed toward the side windows.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side window
outlets.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
A (Fan): Turn the knob in the center of the system
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the fan speed. The fan must be on to run the
air-conditioning compressor.
Temperature Control: Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
Operation
To change the current mode, turn the right knob to
select one of the following:
? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or
to help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light above
the button will come on to let you know that it is
activated. The air-conditioning compressor comes on.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The recirculation mode can be used with vent, bi-level,
or floor modes, but it cannot be used with the defog
or defrost modes. When you switch to the defog
or defrost modes the system will automatically move
from recirculation to outside air. When you move
the mode knob back to another mode, the system will
move back into recirculation. When the car is turned off
and back on the system will default to outside air
automatically.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
AC (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is pressed,
an indicator light above the button will come on to let
you know that air conditioning is activated.
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to choose from to clear
fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode
to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode directs half of the air to the
windshield and half to the floor outlets with a small
amount directed to the side windows. When you select
this mode, the system turns off recirculation automatically
and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless the
outside temperature is at or below freezing. The
recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select A/C.
4. Select the recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
1 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield with some air directed to the floor vents.
In this mode, the system will automatically force outside
air into your vehicle and run the air-conditioning
compressor. Recirculation cannot be selected while in
the defrost mode.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
< REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light above the
button will come on to let your know that the rear
window defogger is activated. Be sure to clear as much
snow from the rear window as possible.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block
the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately seven
minutes before turning off. The defogger can also be
turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off
the engine.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
If your vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the mirrors
will also heat when the rear defogger is on. See Outside
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger
compartment air filter. It is located underneath the hood
just below the windshield wiper arm on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering the
Climate Control System. Like your engine’s air
cleaner/filter, it may need to be changed periodically to
insure system performance. For information on how
often to change the passenger compartment air
For the type of filter to use, see Normal Maintenance
3. Use a tool to open the passenger compartment
air filter access door.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
4. Remove any leaves or other debris from the
filter area.
1. Open the hood. Locate the passenger compartment
air filer access panel.
2. Peel back the hood weatherstrip from the
passenger’s side of the vehicle halfway to center.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may
be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
5. Release the two locking tabs and pull the filter out.
6. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your trip odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven since the trip odometer was last reset.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold
the trip/reset button on the speedometer for about
two seconds.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles or kilometers.
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. You may
wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new
odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done.
If it can’t, it will be set at zero and a label must be put
on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed. If the mileage is
unknown, the label should then indicate “previous
mileage unknown”.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tachometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime
will come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt
is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
The maximum rpm is limited in PARK (P) and
NEUTRAL (N) to 4000 rpm by the vehicle’s computer.
This is to prevent engine damage.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensor, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly. Have your
vehicle serviced right away.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the brake system warning light comes on, there is
a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
Battery Warning Light
The battery warning light
will come on briefly as a
check, when you turn
on the ignition. Then it
should go out when
The BRAKE light is
located in the instrument
panel cluster.
the engine is started.
If the light does not come on when you start your
vehicle, have your vehicle serviced right away. This
condition may indicate your battery warning light is not
functioning properly. If this light comes on while you
are driving, be sure to turn off accessories such as the
radio and climate control system. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
When the ignition is on, the BRAKE light will come on
when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if
your parking brake doesn’t release fully. A chime will
also sound if the parking brake is not fully released and
the vehicle is moving. If it stays on after your parking
brake is fully released, it means you have a brake
problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
The BRAKE light will also come on to indicate a low
more information.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
The ABS light is located
in the instrument panel
cluster, to the left of
the engine coolant
temperature gage.
{CAUTION:
If the light stays on longer than a few seconds after you
start your engine, or comes on and stays on while
you are driving, try resetting the system. To reset the
system, do the following:
1. If you are driving, pull over when it is safe to do so.
2. Be sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the ignition.
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
4. Then restart the engine.
If the light remains on after resetting the system or
comes on again while driving, your vehicle needs
service. If the ABS light is on, but the regular brake
system warning light is not on, you do not have anti-lock
brakes, but you still have regular brakes. Have your
vehicle serviced right away. If both brake lights are on,
you do not have anti-lock brakes, and there’s a
problem with your regular brakes as well. Have your
vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-37.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, the anti-lock brake
system (ABS) warning light will come on briefly, as
a check, when you start your vehicle. If it does not, have
your vehicle serviced so that the light works properly
when it needs to.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The Traction Control
The engine coolant
System (TCS) light will
come on when the system
is limiting wheel spin.
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal. The roads may be slippery if this light comes on.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
page 5-23 for more information.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the system
stops limiting wheel spin. This light should also come
on for a few seconds when you start your vehicle.
If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by your warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on.
This light will also come on when starting your vehicle.
If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Low Coolant Warning Light
This gage measures the
temperature of the
This light comes on
briefly when you turn
your ignition on.
vehicle’s engine. If the
indicator needle moves
into the shaded area,
the engine is too hot.
A temperature indicator
light will turn on and
a chime will sound.
If this light comes on and stays on, the coolant level in
your vehicle is low. If the light is on along with an
overheat warning, you may have a serious overheating
page 3-30.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, and the temperature indicator
light comes on, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
Notice: Driving with the low coolant warning light
on could cause your vehicle to overheat. See
page 5-20. Your vehicle could be damaged and the
damages might not be covered by your warranty.
on what to do. Your vehicle should be serviced as soon
as possible.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This light should come on, as a check to show you
it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good,
and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could
lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by
your warranty.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the Light Is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
• Reducing vehicle speed
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your
vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds
and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is
still flashing, follow the previous steps, and see
your retailer for service as soon as possible.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
This can happen if you have recently replaced your
battery or if your battery has run down. The diagnostic
system is designed to evaluate critical emission
control systems during normal driving. This may take
several days of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack
of OBD system readiness, your retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your retailer can check the vehicle. Your retailer has the
proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem,
this light will stay on after
you start your engine,
or come on when you are
driving. This indicates
that your engine is
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
not receiving enough oil.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON light is on or not working properly.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The oil light may also come on when the ignition is on
but the engine is not running, the light will come on as a
test to show you it is working, but the light will go out
when you turn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come
on with the ignition on, you may have a problem with
the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
Change Engine Oil Light
If this light comes on and
stays on, it means that
service is required for
your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Security Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
With this system, the
security light will flash
as you open the door if
your ignition is off.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reduced Engine Power Light
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
briefly when you start the
engine.
This light will illuminate
when the headlamp high
beams are in use.
This light is displayed when a noticeable reduction in
the vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop the vehicle
and turn off the ignition. Wait for 10 seconds and restart
your vehicle. This may correct the condition.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
If this light stays on, see your retailer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
This light is located on the
instrument panel cluster.
It goes on whenever
the Daytime Running
Lamps are on.
further information.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Service Vehicle Soon Light
This light will come on
when your vehicle is low
on windshield washer fluid.
This light will come on
if you have certain
non-emission related
vehicle problems.
Take your vehicle in for service as soon as possible.
page 5-32.
Fuel Gage
Trunk Ajar Light
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left in your tank.
If this light comes on,
your trunk or liftgate is
ajar. Try closing the trunk
or liftgate again. Never
drive with the trunk
or liftgate open.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light will
come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
page 3-37 for more information.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel
gage will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low
on fuel. When you add fuel the light should go off.
If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize after the
ignition is turned on, and will go back to empty
when you turn the ignition off.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your retailer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
Setting the Time
Press and hold the RCL button and at the same time
press the HR arrow or the MIN arrow until the correct
hour and minute appear on the display. The time can be
set with the ignition on or off.
Notice: Getting suntan lotion, hand lotion, or hand
cleaner on the radio, will soften the paint, and
the paint will eventually begin to peel. Repairs will
not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty. Try not to
get suntan lotion, hand lotion, or hand cleaner on
the radio. If you do, wipe the lotion or cleaner
off immediately.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Radio with CD
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection.
R TUNE Q: Press the up or down arrow to select
radio stations.
R SEEK Q: Press the up or down arrow to go to the
next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
SCN (Scan): Press this button to scan stations. The
radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next station. Press this button again to stop
scanning.
Playing the Radio
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
PUSH ON (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select the stations, perform the following:
1. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
2. Press and hold AM FM until you hear a beep.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
The radio will begin to search the current band.
The radio will store the stations, starting from the
lowest frequency, to each preset pushbutton. A.SET
will appear on the display when the radio is
finished storing the stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
Cancelling Automatic Set
The radio retains the previously stored stations so they
can be recalled when automatic set is canceled.
Press and hold A.SET until you hear a beep. A.SET will
no longer appear on the display.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
If the battery has been disconnected or a radio fuse
has been removed, the preset stations and time of day
will need to be reset.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
MODE: Press this button until BAS or TRE appears
on the display. Press the plus or minus buttons to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
Using Automatic Set
A.SET (Automatic Set): Press this button to have
the radio automatically select the first 12 strongest
radio stations for FM and the six strongest radio
stations for AM.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
MODE: To adjust the balance between the right and
the left speakers, press this button until BAL appears on
the display. Press the plus or minus buttons to move
the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Press the plus or minus buttons to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Playing a CD
1 PRV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving backward
through the CD.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
You can insert a CD with the ignition off.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
2 NXT (Next): Press this pushbutton to go to the next
track. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the CD.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the track. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the track. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
EJ (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CD Messages
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off
random play.
ERR (Error): If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again to
turn off repeat play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
Q TUNE SEEK R: Press the up arrow to go to the
start of the current or of the previous track. Press the
down arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to see the track
number. Press this button again to see how long the
current track has been playing.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
retailer when reporting the problem.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
when a CD is loaded.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
Radio with Cassette and CD
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection.
R TUNE Q: Press the up or down arrow to select
radio stations.
R SEEK SCAN Q: Press the up or down arrow to go
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow until you
hear a beep. SCAN will appear on the display. The
radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then
go on to the next station. Press either arrow again
to stop scanning.
shown — Six-Disc CD Player similar
Playing the Radio
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
PUSH ON (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Automatic Set
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
A.SET (Automatic Set): Press this button to have the
radio automatically select the first 12 strongest radio
stations for FM and the six strongest radio stations
for AM.
1. Turn the radio on.
To select the stations, perform the following:
1. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
2. Press and hold AM FM until you hear a beep.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press the AUTO TONE arrow to select the
equalization.
The radio will begin to search the current band.
The radio will store the stations, starting from the
lowest frequency, to each preset pushbutton. A.SET
will appear on the display when the radio is
finished storing the stations.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
Cancelling Automatic Set
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
The radio retains the previously stored stations so they
can be recalled when automatic set is canceled.
If the battery has been disconnected or a radio fuse has
been removed, the preset stations and time of day
will need to be reset.
Press and hold A.SET until you hear a beep. A.SET will
no longer appear on the display.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well
in this player. The longer side with the tape visible
should face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a
garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely.
Press EJ to remove the tape and start over.
BASS/TREB (Treble): Press and release this knob
until BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn the
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
show the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or
noisy, decrease the treble.
R AUTO TONE Q (Automatic Tone): Press either
arrow to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, news, pop, rock, and
classical. There is also a flat setting that has been
factory tuned for the best overall performance.
If the ignition and radio are off, press the eject button or
the RCL knob to insert and to begin play of a tape. If
the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can
be inserted and will begin playing.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
press either arrow until CSTM appears on the display.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, BASS/TREB/
FADE/BAL, and AUTO TONE controls just as you do for
the radio. The tape symbol will appear on the display
and an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players
will work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter
Kits” later for more information.
FADE/BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
this knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the
knob to move the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release this knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current selection. Press this pushbutton
again to go to the previous selection on the tape.
R REW (Rewind): Press the down arrow to quickly
rewind the tape. Press it again to return to playing
speed. The radio will play while the tape rewinds.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next
selection on the tape. The radio will play while the tape
advances.
Q FF (Fast Forward): Press the up arrow to quickly
advance the tape. Press it again to return to playing
speed. The radio will play while the tape advances.
3 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of
the tape.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
tape is playing. The inactive tape will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
4 W (Dolby®): Press this button to remove
background noise. The double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
Dolby® Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby® Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby® Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
CD TP (Tape) / AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
play a tape when listening to the radio. Press this button
to switch between the tape, CD, and DVD (if equipped)
if loaded. The inactive tape, CD, or DVD will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
EJ (Eject): Press this button, located to the left of the
cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Eject may be
activated with the radio off.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a
selection over again. RPT will appear on the display.
The current selection will continue to repeat. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
Cassette Tape Messages
ERR (Error): If this message appears on the display,
the tape will not play because of one of the following
errors.
CD Adapter Kits
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,
the tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the player. Try a new tape to make sure the
player is working properly.
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with the cassette tape player. Insert the adapter as you
would insert a normal tape and the adapter should
begin playing. The display and radio buttons will function
the same.
If the adapter cassette will not play, press the SIDE
pushbutton to reverse the adapter. If the adapter still will
not play, refer to the directions that came with the
adapter.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head.
Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
Playing the Single CD Player
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD when the ignition is off, first
press the eject button or push the RCL knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good cassette.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off
random play. When in random play, press the PREV
pushbutton to repeat the current track one time.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again to
turn off repeat play.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
R REW (Rewind): Press and hold the down arrow to
rewind quickly within a track. Release it to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Q FF (Fast Forward): Press and hold the up arrow to
advance quickly within a track. Release it to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track. If this pushbutton is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
Q SEEK R: Press the up arrow to go to the start of
the current or of the previous track. Press the down
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either arrow
is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the CD.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to see the track
number. Press this button again to see how long the
current track has been playing.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
CD TP (Tape): Press this button to play a CD when
listening to the radio. Press this button to switch
between the tape, CD, and DVD (if equipped) if loaded.
The inactive tape, CD, or DVD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
EJ (Eject): Press this button, located to the left of the
CD slot, to eject a CD. Eject may be activated with either
the ignition or radio off.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If you eject a CD, but decide that you want to listen to
it, press the CD/TP button. This will pull the CD
back in and it will begin to play.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LD/EJ (Load/Eject): Press the LD button to load CDs
into the CD player. This CD player will hold up to
six CDs.
Playing the Six-Disc CD Player
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To load or eject one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
3. Load, up to six CDs, in order, starting with slot 1.
Loading will continue until all six CDs are loaded
or load is stopped by pressing any other radio
button.
2. Press and release the LD/EJ button. NUM will
appear on the display. Flashing numbers at the
bottom of the display indicate empty CD slots.
You can cancel the loading or the ejecting of a CD by
pressing the LD/EJ button once, if in NUM selection, or
twice, if the CD is already loading or ejecting.
3. Press the pushbutton (1-6) for the CD slot to load
or to eject. WAIT will appear on the display.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track. If this pushbutton is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
If a CD is already loaded the CD will eject.
If the CD slot is empty, LOAD will appear on the
display, and a CD can be loaded.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the CD.
If you select an equalization setting for your CD, it will
be activated each time you play a CD.
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton once to
hear the tracks on the current CD in random, rather than
sequential, order. RDM will appear on the display.
If the radio is on or off, the CD will begin to play
automatically.
To load or eject all CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
Press this pushbutton twice to hear the tracks on all of
the CDs loaded in random, rather than sequential,
order. ALL RDM will appear on the display.
2. Press and hold the LD/EJ button.
If any CDs are loaded, EJT will appear on the
display and the CDs will begin to eject.
Press this pushbutton to turn off random play.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT will appear on the display. The current
track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
When all slots are empty, LOAD will appear on
the display.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R REW (Rewind): Press and hold the down arrow to
rewind quickly within a track. Release this button to
play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
CD Messages
ERR (Error): If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
Q FF (Fast Forward): Press and hold the up arrow to
advance quickly within a track. Release this button to
play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
Q CD SEEK R: Press the up arrow to go to the
previous CD. Press the down arrow to go to the
next CD.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to see the track
number, press this button again to see how long the
current track has been playing.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when
listening to the radio. Press this button to switch
between the tape, CD, and DVD (if equipped) if loaded.
The inactive tape, CD, or DVD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headphones
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the
vehicles audio system and includes a DVD radio, a
video display screen, two sets of wireless headphones,
and a remote control.
Before You Drive
The RSE system is designed for rear seat passengers
only. The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system may or may not work until the temperature is
within the operating range. The operating range for the
RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of your vehicle is
outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating range of the
RSE system. To resume operation, shut off the RSE,
pull down the video screen and then heat or cool
the vehicle until the temperature is within the
operating range.
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones. The headphones are used to listen to the
DVD radio or an auxiliary device connected to the
RCA jacks. The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF
switch and a volume control.
To use the headphones, turn the switch, located on the
left side, to ON. An indicator light located on the
headphones will illuminate. If the light does not illuminate,
the batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section for more information.
Switch the headphones to OFF when not in use.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The transmitters are located in the display above the
video screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
to save the battery power if the DVD system is shut
off or if the headphones are out of range of the
transmitters for more than three minutes. If you move
too far forward or step out of the vehicle, the
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Slide open the battery door located on the left side
of the headphones.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
headphones will lose the audio signal.
If the RSE system is shut off or if the headphones are
out of range of the transmitters, located at the top of the
video screen, for more than three minutes, the
headphones will shut off automatically to save battery
power. If you move too far forward or step out of
the vehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal.
3. Slide the battery door shut.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
The RCA jacks are located on the faceplate of the DVD
player. The RCA jacks allow audio or video signals
to be connected from an auxiliary device such as
a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Adapter connectors or cables may be required to
connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
The RCA jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (top)
is for the video input. The white jack (middle) is for the
left audio input. The red jack (bottom) is for the right
audio input.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary function, connect a camcorder or
a video game unit to the RCA jacks and turn on the
auxiliary device. If you want to view a DVD, insert the
DVD into the DVD player. The system will automatically
switch to DVD and start to play. To switch between the
auxiliary device and the DVD, press the SOURCE button
on the DVD player or on the remote control. See “DVD
Player” and “Remote Control” later in this section for
more information.
Video Screen
Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time.
Audio from the radio, cassette, or CD player will be
heard through all speakers when the front audio system
is being used.
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
Sound from the DVD player or an auxiliary device can
be heard through all speakers when the front audio
system is off and a DVD auxiliary device is playing.
To hear the DVD or an auxiliary device when the front
audio system is on, use the headphones.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the video screen, do the following:
DVD Player
1. Push forward on the release button and the screen
will fold down.
2. Pull the screen toward you and adjust its position
as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its
locked position, the screen will shut off, but the DVD
will continue to play through the previously selected
audio source.
The DVD player is located in the center console
between the front seats.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on
the DVD player and the remote control. See “Remote
Control” later in this section for more information.
Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for more
information.
The DVD player works while the ignition is in RUN
or ACC.
The RSE system is only compatible with DVDs
authorized for use in the United States and Canada
(Region Code 1). The DVD region code is printed on
the jacket of most DVDs. Regular audio CDs, CD-R,
CD-RW, and MP3s can also be played by the
DVD player.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the DVD does not begin playing the movie
automatically, press play/pause button on the DVD
player or the remote control. If the DVD still does not
play, refer to the on-screen instructions.
DVD Player Buttons
SOURCE: Press this button to switch the source for the
RSE system between the auxiliary device (connected
to the RCA jacks) and the DVD player. Pressing
this button has no effect when an auxiliary device is not
connected.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press the stop/eject button on
the DVD player.
p / j: Press this button to start play. Press while
To resume playback, press the play/pause button. The
movie should resume play from where it last stopped
if the disc has not been ejected. If the disc has
been ejected, the disc will resume playing at the
beginning of the disc.
playing to pause. Press it again to continue playing.
o / Z: Press this button to stop playing. Press this
button a second time to eject the disc.
Playing a Disc
Ejecting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot until it stops. The DVD player
will continue loading the disc and the player will
automatically start.
Press the stop/eject button on the DVD player once to
stop and a second time to eject a disc.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed, the
DVD player will reload the disc after a short period of
time. The disc will be stored in the player. The player will
not resume play of the disc automatically.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player or the remote control to
start playing the disc.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished,
although there may be a delay of up to 30 seconds.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the display above
the video screen and press the desired button.
Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability
of the RSE system to receive signals from the remote
control. If the remote control does not seem to be
working, the batteries may need to be replaced. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objects
blocking the line of sight may also affect the function of
the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
k (Play/Pause): Press this button to play a disc.
Press this button while a disc is playing to pause
it. Press this button again to continue playing the disc.
If you press and hold this button for 3 seconds or more,
the DVD player will turn off.
rFwd/q Rev (Fast Forward/Reverse): Press this
right or left arrow once to fast forward or reverse
the DVD. To resume play, press the button again or
press the play/pause button. Pressing and holding
an arrow will fast forward or fast reverse the DVD and
play will resume when the arrow is released. These
buttons may not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the previews.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
QNext/R Prev (Next/Previous): Press the up or the
down arrow to select the next or the previous chapter.
These buttons may not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the previews.
DVD Distortion
Menu: Press this button to view the media menu.
The media menu is different for every disc. Use the up,
down, right, and left arrow buttons to move the cursor
around the media menu. After making the selection,
press Enter. Some discs may contain a short skit leading
up to the media menu.
There may be an experience with video distortion
when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB radios,
Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile
fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
Source: Press this button to switch the source for the
RSE system between the auxiliary device (connected
to the RCA jacks) and the DVD player. Pressing
this button has no effect when there is no auxiliary
device connected.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the DVD Player
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and buttons,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Battery Replacement
Cleaning the Video Screen
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result.
1. Remove the screw and open the battery
compartment door located on the back of the
remote control.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
3. Replace the battery door and the screw.
The Radio with Cassette and CD and the Radio with
Cassette and Six-Disc CD have a theft deterrent feature.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The theft deterrent feature is designed to discourage
theft of your vehicle’s radio. It works by using a secret
code to disable all radio functions whenever battery
power is interrupted.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 5 and 6 pushbuttons at the same time for
five seconds. -- -- -- -- will appear on the display.
Next you will use the secret code number which you
have written down.
The theft deterrent feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the radio plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If the theft deterrent
feature is activated, the radio will not operate if stolen.
5. Press the SEEK/SCAN up arrow to make the first
digit agree with your code.
6. Press the SEEK/SCAN down arrow to make the
second digit agree with your code.
When the theft deterrent feature is activated, LOCK will
appear on the radio display to indicate a locked condition
anytime battery power has been interrupted. If the battery
loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio
with the secret code before it will operate.
7. Press the TUNE up arrow to make the third digit
agree with your code.
8. Press the TUNE down arrow to make the fourth
digit agree with your code.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
9. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. REP will appear on the display to indicate
that Steps 5 through 8 need to be repeated to
confirm your secret code.
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the theft deterrent feature.
Read through all 10 steps before starting the procedure.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time
and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
10. Press AM-FM again. SEC will appear on the display
to indicate that the radio is secure.
If SEC is not displayed, but displays Err1, Err2, or
LOCK, the theft deterrent feature is already set
to another code. See “Disabling the Theft-Deterrent
Feature” later in this section.
1. Write down any four-digit number from
0000 to 9999 and keep it in a safe place
separate from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to RUN.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature
After a Power Loss
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
Preform Steps 1 through 9 from the “Activating the
Theft-Deterrent Feature” earlier to enter your secret
code. OFF will appear on the display indicating the
theft deterrent feature is off.
1. Turn the ignition on. -- -- -- -- will appear on the
display.
2. Preform Steps 5 through 8 from the “Activating
the Theft-Deterrent Feature” earlier to enter your
secret code.
If OFF does not appear on the display, the wrong
code was entered. If you enter the wrong code,
the display will momentarily show an error message
and all radio functions will continue to be disabled.
If -- -- -- -- appears on the display, you can try to enter
your secret code again.
3. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. SEC will appear on the display, indicating the
radio is now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code three times, LOCK will
appear on the display. Contact your Saturn retailer.
Your Saturn retailer is authorized to obtain the factory
programmed code that is assigned to the radio to
reset the system.
If you enter the wrong code, the display will momentarily
show an error message and all radio functions will
continue to be disabled. If -- -- -- -- appears on
the display, you can try to enter your secret code again.
If you enter the wrong code three times, LOCK will
appear on the display. Contact your Saturn retailer.
Your Saturn retailer is authorized to obtain the factory
programmed code that is assigned to the radio to
reset the system.
If you forget your code, if the theft deterrent feature
is accidentally activated with an unknown code, or if
the radio is in the locked mode, contact your Saturn
retailer.
If you forget your code, if the theft deterrent feature
is accidentally activated with an unknown code, or if
the radio is in the locked mode, contact your Saturn
retailer.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
30 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that the tape player has been used for 30 hours
without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message
appears on the display, the cassette tape player
needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should
be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in sound
quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape
or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your retailer.
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
The cut tape detection feature of the cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette as a damaged
tape, in error. If the cleaning cassette ejects, insert
the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough
cleaning.
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or they may cause failure of the tape player.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head
can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not
clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After the player is cleaned, insert a cassette tape, press
and hold the eject button for five seconds to reset the
CLEAN indicator. CLEAN will no longer appear on
the display to show the indicator was reset.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before the tape player is
serviced.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the rear quarter panel.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the
same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or
90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC
would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes
food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control System
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear
the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light should come on
briefly when you start the
engine. If it stays on or
comes on while you
are driving, there’s a
problem with your traction
control system.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
page 3-29. When this warning light is on, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
You may feel or hear the system working, but
this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-10.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the system off,
press the trac switch.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
The traction control system warning light will come on
and stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin when you
press the button, the warning light will come on — but the
system won’t turn off right away. It will wait until there’s no
longer a current need to limit wheel spin.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The traction control system
warning light should go off.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control. See Traction Control
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying
to steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
Skidding
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid, where the wheels are
no longer rolling, release enough pressure on the brakes
to get the wheels rolling again. This restores steering
control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when
you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are
rolling, you will have steering control.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Driving at Night
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
City Driving
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just your
parking lamps — to help make you more visible
to others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
on page 5-48.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts at
Saturn retailers all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Highway Hypnosis
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of
sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies
in your trunk.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can
be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle
has a traction control system, you will want to slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under
certain conditions, you may want to turn the traction
control system off, such as when driving through deep
snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control System
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you will
want to brake very gently, too. If you do have anti-lock,
system improves your vehicle’s stability when you make a
hard stop on a slippery road. Whether you have the
anti-lock braking system or not, you will want to begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
Without anti-lock brakes, if you feel your vehicle begin to
slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal
down steadily to get the most traction you can.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide.
Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach:
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
{CAUTION:
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Recovery Hook
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear
the area around your front wheels. You should turn your
traction control system off. See Traction Control System
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when
the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not
get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed
out. Or, you can use your recovery hook. If you do need
Your vehicle is equipped with a recovery hook. The
recovery hook is provided at the rear of your vehicle.
It can only be used for pulling your vehicle out.
{CAUTION:
The recovery hook, when used, is under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hook at a sideways angle.
The hook could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use the recovery hook to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle
can carry. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Vehicle Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached
below the door lock post (striker). The tire and
loading information label lists the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For
more information on tires and inflation, see Tires
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity
for your vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
page 4-40 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Description
Example 2
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification Label
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A vehicle specific Certification label is found on the rear
edge of the driver’s door.
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Available Cargo
Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s maximum
vehicle capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo
should never exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehicle
capacity weight.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else
are put inside the vehicle, they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load, spread
it out. Do not carry more than 167 lbs (75 kg)
in your trunk.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
page 4-22.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
Dinghy Towing
4. Open the lid on the underhood fuse block and
remove the IGN 0/3/CR and IGN 1/2 fuses.
Refer to the underside of the underhood fuse block
cover for specific fuse locations.
You may dinghy tow your vehicle from the front following
these steps:
5. Close the lid on the underhood fuse block and store
the two fuses in a safe place.
6. Close the hood.
7. Release the parking brake.
Once you have reached your destination replace the
IGN 0/3/CR and IGN 1/2 fuses.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC to unlock
the steering wheel.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered
by the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed
from the rear.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to
work harder against the drag of the added weight. The
engine is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.
What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at:
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
(90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
In Canada, write to:
• the weight of the trailer tongue
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada, Ltd.,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32 for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label, See Loading Your
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
Trailer Brakes
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try to
tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the
hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
water can, too.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P).
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from
the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels
into the curb.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transaxle overheating.
2. Have someone place chocks behind
the trailer wheels.
Parking on Hills
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
5. Release the regular brakes.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
information. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (do not
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive belt, cooling
system and brake system. Each of these is covered in
this manual, and the Index will help you find them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review this
information before you start your trip.
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-23.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Service
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
Your Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go to your
retailer for all your service needs. You will get genuine
Saturn parts and Saturn-trained and supported
service people.
We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicle
all Saturn.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-9.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your retailer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saturn retailer
for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines
that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline. Also, your retailer has additives that will
help correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized Saturn retailer
for service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
Filling Your Tank
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the
cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right.
{CAUTION:
While refueling, let the fuel
cap hang by the tether
below the fuel fill opening.
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer
and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it.
It is located on the
driver’s side of
the vehicle, under the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on
the secondary hood release lever.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then just let the
hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
D. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
information.
page 5-31 for more information.
information.
on page 5-26 for more information.
H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-32 for more information.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the MIN mark, then you will need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the upper mark that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all
the way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil
light being turned on, reset the system.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
After changing the engine oil, reset the system by
performing the following steps:
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
necessary. A change engine oil light will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. Your retailer has trained
service people who will perform this work using genuine
Saturn parts and reset the system. It is also important
to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
times within five seconds.
If the change engine oil light is flashing, the system
is reset. The light will flash for up to 30 seconds
or until the ignition is turned off.
If the light comes on again and stays on for 30 seconds
at the next ignition cycle, it did not reset. You will
need to reset the system again.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace at the first oil change after
50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a
service station or a local recycling center for help.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
3. Pull the air cleaner/filter box cover out and remove
the air filter element from the air filter box. If the
element is dirty, you should replace it. If the element
is only dusty, it may be cleaned by blowing
1. Remove the hose clamp that is on the inlet duct on
the cover and pull off the hose.
compressed air through it from the clean side. Make
sure you are away from your engine compartment
when cleaning the air filter with compressed air.
2. Release the two clips and turn the cover upward to
unhook the hinges.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
4. Wipe all dust from inside the housing and inspect
the air cleaner and air inlet tube for cracks, cuts
and deterioration. The air inlet tube must be
replaced if it is damaged.
5. Install the air filter element, hose, hose clamp
and cover.
6. Latch the two clips.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to retailer’s service
department and have it repaired as soon as possible.
You may also have your fluid level checked by your
retailer or service center when you have your oil
changed.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 100,000 miles
(166 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-23.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
service.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the
H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by your warranty.
Always use automatic transaxle fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your retailer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
The surge tank is located in the engine compartment on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the Cold
line (surge tank seam). When your engine is warm,
the level should be at the Cold line or a little higher.
If the low coolant light comes on and stays on, it means
you are low on engine coolant. See Low Coolant
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
for instructions on “How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank.”
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
If you replace your coolant surge tank pressure cap,
a Saturn cap is required.
{CAUTION:
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a coolant
temperature warning light on your vehicle’s instrument
warning light on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant light, can
indicate a serious problem. See Low Coolant Warning
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant light, but see or hear no steam, the problem may
not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a
little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of
the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn it off.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in a traffic
jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the
highest gear possible while driving.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about ten minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at the COLD line (surge
tank seam). If it is not, you may have a leak at the
radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Fan
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the
engine.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
{CAUTION:
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark,
add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be
sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, your engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and you
or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about one-quarter of a
turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
will allow any pressure still left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the COLD line.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the
COLD line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check the level in the surge tank when the cooling
system has cooled down. If the coolant is not at the
proper level, repeat Steps 1 through 3 then reinstall the
pressure cap. If the coolant is not at the proper level
when the system cools down again, see your retailer.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
Power Steering Fluid
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located toward
the front of the engine
compartment on the
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
driver’s side of the vehicle.
Overview on page 5-12
for reservoir location.
The level should be at the “C” mark. If necessary, add
only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When you need windshield or rear window washer fluid,
be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a
fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add
fluid when your linings are worn, then you will have
too much fluid when you get new brake linings.
You should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,
only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
reservoir.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the
fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should
have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will
not work at all.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-13.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving,
except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or
heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly.
If you drive in that way, then — very carefully — make a
few moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles
(1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
Saturn replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to Saturn torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your retailer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When
it is time for a new battery, get one that has the
replacement number shown on the original battery’s
label. We recommend an ACDelco® replacement
page 5-12 for battery location.
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt
page 5-37 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could cause
a ground connection you do not want. You
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
would not be able to start your vehicle, and the
bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more light.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Remove the terminal cover and connect the red
positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. The positive (+) terminal
on your vehicle is covered by a red protector cap
which must be removed before you connect
the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to disarm your security system
(if equipped).
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
Bulb Replacement
page 5-46.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your retailer.
for more information.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
2. Remove push-pin fasteners from the grill assembly.
3. Tilt the grill assembly forward and lift it up to
remove it from the vehicle.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Remove the fasteners from the headlamp assembly.
5. Push the headlamp housing lever up to disengage
the headlamp housing from the headlamp housing
pocket.
6. Turn the bulb socket being replaced
counterclockwise one-quarter of a turn while
pressing the socket in firmly.
7. Pull the socket rearward until the bulb clears
the headlamp housing, and lift it up to access
the bulb.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
1. Locate the fog lamp by reaching up from
underneath the front body panel.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise one-quarter
of a turn while pressing the socket in firmly.
3. Pull the socket rearward until the bulb clears the
fog lamp housing.
8. Disconnect the wire connector from the bulb by
lifting the lock tab and pulling it away from the
plastic base.
9. Remove the bulb assembly and replace it with
the appropriate bulb.
10. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
4. Disconnect the wire connector from the bulb by
lifting the lock tab and pulling it away from the
plastic base.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the bulb assembly and replace it with
the appropriate bulb.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the fog lamp
assembly.
for more information.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
2. Pull back the interior trim.
1. Remove the center high-mounted stoplamp cover
by pulling down on the cover edges.
2. Turn the bulb socket being replaced
counterclockwise one-quarter of a turn and remove
the bulb.
3. Replace it with the appropriate bulb.
4. Replace the cover.
3. Remove the fasteners from the backside of the
taillamp assembly.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamps
CHMSL
Bulb Number
P21W21019520
PC16825085970
880L12450143
34571999381
Fog Lamps
Front Park/Turn Lamps
Front Sidemarker Lamps
Headlamps
W5W12092811
—
High-Beam
9005 HB39441732
9006 HB49441733
P21W21019521
P21/5W21019520
4. Remove the taillamp assembly.
Low-Beam
5. Turn the bulb socket being replaced
counterclockwise one-quarter of a turn while
pressing the socket in firmly.
Rear Turn Lamps
Stop/Taillamps
6. Pull the socket rearward until the bulb clears the
taillamp assembly.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
retailer.
7. Replace it with the appropriate bulb.
8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the taillamp assembly.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Windshield
Wipers, Blade Check” under Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
page 6-14. Here’s how to remove the wiper blades:
1. Turn on the wipers to the low wipe setting.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the
outer positions of the wiper pattern. The blades
are more accessible for removal/replacement
while in this position.
4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass,
push the release clip from under the blade
connecting point and pull the old blade assembly
down toward the glass to remove it from the
wiper arm.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
5. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip “click” into place.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
{CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Saturn Warranty booklet for details. For
additional information refer to the tire manufacturer’s
booklet included with your vehicle’s owner manual.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are
dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
page 4-32.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall.
The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle
tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The
TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Compact Spare Tire Example
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kiloPascal (kPa).
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 60 percent as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of
a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with
the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes
the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand and date of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
When to Check
• Reduced fuel economy
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget
to check the compact spare tire, it should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-72.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
How to Check
• Rough ride
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
If you are towing your Saturn vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the transaxle and tire maintenance should
be scheduled by mileage accumulated through both
driving and towing, not to driven (odometer) mileage.
Tire wear will reflect actual “rolling” mileage and may be
greater than expected for the current odometer mileage.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-60 for more information.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32, for an example of the tire and loading
information label and its location on your vehicle.
Make certain that all wheel bolts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Bolt Torque” under Capacities and
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel bolts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
{CAUTION:
To find out what kind and size of tires your vehicle
needs, look at the tire and loading information label.
For more information about this label and its location on
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires
on all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new
tires, GM recommends that you get tires with that same
TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue
to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance,
handling, speed rating, load range, traction, ride and
other things during normal service on your vehicle.
If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
While the tires available on Saturn passenger cars and
light trucks may vary with respect to these grades,
they must also conform to federal safety requirements
and additional General Motors Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
one way or the other, the alignment may need to
be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
{CAUTION:
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel bolts keep coming loose, the
wheel and wheel bolts should be replaced. If the wheel
leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your Saturn
Retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels or wheel
bolts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It
could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured. Always
use the correct wheel and wheel bolts for
replacement.
Your retailer will know the kind of wheel or wheel bolt
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels or wheel
bolts, replace them only with new Saturn original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel and wheel bolts for your Saturn.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original
equipment wheel.
Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and
don’t spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
front tires.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in
a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lift the trunk liner and place the plastic hook in the
lip of the trunk.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
4. Remove the nut that holds down the spare tire.
6. Remove the wheel wrench from the jack. It is held
in place by two clips which are attached to the jack.
7. Fold out the socket portion of the wrench from the
handle.
The equipment you’ll need is located in the trunk.
1. Open the jack access door on the left side panel of
the trunk.
2. Remove the nut that holds the jack in place and
remove the jack together with the wheel wrench.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
You must take off the wheel cover or hubcap to reach
the wheel bolts.
For steel wheels with full plastic covers and aluminum
wheels with large circular center caps, do the following:
1. Loosen all five hex-shaped plastic caps by
turning the wrench counterclockwise. Do not try
to remove plastic caps from the cover or center cap.
2. Pull the cover or center cap away from the wheel
and place it in the trunk.
When reinstalling full plastic covers or center caps,
tighten all five plastic caps hand snug with the aid of the
wheel wrench and tighten them with the wheel wrench
an additional one-quarter of a turn.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel
wrench (B).
Once the wheel cover is removed, use the following
steps to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire.
1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack bolt head and
rotate the wheel wrench clockwise. That will raise
the lift head a little.
3. Locate the jack notches (A and B) in the vehicle’s
frame.
4. Position the jack in the notch near the tire being
changed, but make sure all of the jack lift head
is touching the jacking flange under the body.
Do not place the jack under a body panel.
5. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
7. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
8. Take off the tire and wheel.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
10. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
11. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand
until the wheel is held against the hub.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{CAUTION:
sequence, as shown.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
14. Lower the jack all the way and remove the jack
from under the vehicle.
15. Tighten the bolts firmly with the wheel wrench.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
specification.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
1. Place the wheel wrench into the clips on the jack.
2. Install the jack in the left side panel of the trunk and
secure as shown on the jacking instruction label
located in the trunk.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Place the flat tire, face down, into the spare tire
compartment. When placing an aluminum flat tire
into the spare tire compartment, be very careful
to avoid scraping the wheel face on the hold-down
bolt and other hard surfaces. The hold-down
bolt should pass through the rear most wheel vent
hold. The flat tire will protrude above the trunk
floor in this position.
After installing the compact spare tire on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
compact spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact
spare tire is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so
you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it is best
to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in
case you need it again.
4. Place the nut onto the hold-down bolt and tighten
down until it is snug.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the
rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. See the storage instructions label to replace
your compact spare into your trunk or cargo area
separately.
Do not use your compact spare tire on other vehicles.
Store the flat tire in the compact spare tire compartment
and secure the adapter, extension (aluminum wheel
only) and wing bolt. Store the jack and wheel wrench in
the foam tray.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel
with other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your
compact spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in a closed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
• Alcohol
• Laundry Soap
• Bleach
• Reducing Agents
Fabric/Carpet
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
• Gasoline
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
• Benzene
Your retaler has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well.
• Naphtha
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Acetone
You can get approved cleaning products from your
dealer.
• Paint Thinner
• Turpentine
• Lacquer Thinner
• Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some cleaning tips:
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry
completely.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturate
the material and do not rub it roughly.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vinyl
Glass Surfaces
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Glass should be cleaned often. Saturn Glass Cleaner
or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove
normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you do not get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your retailer for this product.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Interior Plastic Components
{CAUTION:
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weatherstrips
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent applications may be required.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-76.
Finish Care
Washing Your Vehicle
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
approved cleaning products from your retailer.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Tires
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your Saturn retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your Saturn
retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
See your Saturn retailer for more information on
purchasing the following products.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Saturn
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Car Wash Soap
Cleans Exterior
Made to use on
basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish
Non-Abrasive Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
Vinyl Cleaner
convertible tops.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Description
Usage
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Glass Cleaner
Wash Wax Concentrate
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Quickly and easily
Removes dust,
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Spot Lifter
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants, Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather
and carpet.
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
light surface
Odor Eliminator
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
contamination.
See your Saturn parts department for these products.
page 6-13.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on your spare tire cover. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label,
you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by fuses. This greatly reduces the chance
of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical
problems.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
There are three fuse blocks — the underhood fuse
block, the driver’s side floor console fuse block and the
passenger’s side floor console fuse block.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
To identify and check fuses and relays, refer to the
Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface of the
fuse panel door.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Floor Console Fuse Block
Fuses
DIMMER
Usage
Dimmer Switch
Left Heated Seat Switch
(If Equipped), Right Heated
Seat Switch (If Equipped), Air
Conditioning, Rear Defogger Relay
IGN 3
DEFOG LED Rear Defog LED
RR COMP
Trunk Compartment Lamp
Windshield Washers and
Wipers (Front)
WIPER
BTSI/BCM/
MIRROR
Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock,
Body Control Module, Power Mirror
Audio, OnStar®, Rear Seat DVD
(Option)
RADIO
Relays
Usage
IGN 3
Ignition Switch
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
HEADLAMP Headlamps
PARKLAMP Park Lamps
The driver’s side instrument panel is located under the
instrument panel on the driver’s left side.
Use a key or a coin to remove the fuse panel door and
access the fuses and relays.
Misc.
Usage
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
LOCKS
HTD SEAT
Usage
Power Door Locks
Heated Seats (If Equipped)
Power Door Locks, Heated Mirror
Relay, Liftgate Latch
BODY
POWER SEAT Power Seat
PREM AMP
FOG LAMP
Premium Sound System Amplifier
Fog Lamps
RR WIPER/
SUNROOF
Rear Wiper/Washer (Wagon),
Sunroof
Relays
Usage
DR UNLOCK Driver Door Unlock
UNLOCK
LOCK
Door Unlock
Door Lock
The passenger’s side fuse block is located under the
instrument panel on the passenger’s right side.
MIRROR
FOG LAMP
WINDOW
Power Mirrors
Fog Lamps
Use a key or a coin to remove the fuse panel door and
access the fuses and relays.
Power Windows, Power Sunroof
Misc.
Usage
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment
fuse block is located in
the forward part of
the engine compartment
near the battery.
Fuses
Usage
IGN 0/3/CR (L4) Ignition Switch
Audio System, OnStar®, Rear Seat
DVD (Option)
RADIO
Body Control Module, Instrument
Cluster, Dimmer Switch
BCM CLUSTER
INJECTOR (L4) Fuel Injectors (2.2L L4, If Equipped)
Ignition Coils (3.0L V6)
IGN (V6)
Electronic Ignition System
EIS (L4)
(2.2L L4, If Equipped)
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
3.0L V6 Engine
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump System
RT HEADLAMP Right Headlamps
ENGINE
CNTL 3 (V6)
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger
BRAKE
Brake Lamps
HVAC
High Blower
BLOWER
Instrument Cluster, Coolant Level
Switch, Air Bag, Electronic
PRND321
IGN 1
Park Neutral Position Switch,
IGN 0
Powertrain Control Module
Hazard Flasher, HBTT (Headlamp
HI Beam Indicator), I/P Cluster
HAZARD
ABS 2
AC
Air Conditioning System
Anit-Lock Brake System
Audio, Data Link Connector, (DLC),
Rear Seat DVD (Option)
CD/DLC
Cooling Fan Control Module,
Powertrain Control Module,
Transaxle (2.2L L4, If Equipped),
Transaxle Control Module (3.0L V6)
CONTROLS
IGN 1
IGN 1/2
HORN
Ignition switch
Horn
Powertrain Control Module (2.2L L4,
If Equipped), Engine Control Module
(3.0L V6), Transaxle Control Module
(3.0L V6)
Backup Lamps, Coolant
Level Switch
BACK-UP/TURN
CONTROLS B+
CRUISE SW Cruise Control Switch
BCM/ECM/
CRUISE
Body Control Module, Engine
Passenger’s Side Instrument Panel
Fuse Block
I/P BATT RT
AUX PWR
Control Module, Cruise Control, ABS
ABS 1
Anit-Lock Brake System
Power Outlet
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump System
COOL FAN 2 Cooling fan module
WIPER
AC
HORN
Wiper System
Air Conditioning System
Horn
ENGINE
3.0L V6 (L81) Engine
CNTL (V6)
3.0L V6 Engine
ENGINE
REAR WIPER Rear Wiper System (Wagon Only)
Cruise Clutch Switch, Emissions
Controls, Air Conditioner Relay,
Heated Oxygen Sensor
CNT (V6)
IGN 3 (L4)
MAIN (V6)
DRL
3.0L V6 Engine
Daytime Running Lamp
BCM 2
Body Control Module
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Front Park Lamps, Taillamps, Front
Marker Lamps, Rear Marker
Lamps, License Lamps, Radio
Display Lights, I/P Cluster
Backlighting, I/P Dimmer, Cigar
Lighter Ring, Ashtray Light,
PRND321 Light, Climate Control
Switch Backlighting
WDO/SUNRF Power Window Relay, Sunroof
(V6)
(3.0L V6)
PARK LAMP
Power Window Relay, Sunroof and
Air Pump Relay (2.2L L4, If
Equipped)
WDO/SUNRF
(L4)
COOL FAN 1 Cooling Fan Module
Diodes
Usage
LT
Left Headlamps
HEADLAMP
Air Conditioner Diode
§
LIGHTER
Cigarette Lighter
Fuses
Usage
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
2.1 lbs
Metric
0.95 kg
8.0 L
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
8.5 quarts
5.0 quarts
15.7 gallons
6.9 quarts
92 ft lb
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
4.7 L
59.4 L
6.5 L
Transaxle
Wheel Nut Torque
125 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
3.0L V6
R
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.02 mm)
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule
We at Saturn want to help you keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we do not know exactly how
you will drive it. You may drive very short distances only
a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive
it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your Saturn retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
When you go to your Saturn retailer for your service
needs, you will know that Saturn-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using genuine
Saturn parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
{CAUTION:
should be checked, when to check it and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the required
know-how and the proper tools and equipment
for the job. If you have any doubt, see your GM
Goodwrench dealer to have a qualified
technician do the work.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine Saturn parts.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your Saturn
retailer do these jobs.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Change Engine Oil light appears, certain
services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil light comes on, it means
that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your Saturn retailer has Saturn-trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
Saturn parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the Change
Engine Oil light comes on within 10 months since vehicle
was purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on 10 months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
•
•
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
•
•
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose
or damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
An Emission Control Service.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid
and filter (severe service only).
See footnote (h).
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Replace engine fuel filter. An Emission
Control Service. See footnote †.
•
Engine cooling system service
(or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Replace timing belt. An Emission
Control Service.
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
•
•
•
•
•
•
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches, glove box hinges,
sunroof (if equipped) and any folding seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make
them last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine
Saturn parts as needed. To help ensure proper
operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and
pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator
and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your Saturn retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
At Each Fuel Fill
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
further details.
(k) Or every 12 months, whichever occurs first. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.
Starter Switch Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
{CAUTION:
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire.
page 5-62.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your retailer for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your retailer for service.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your retailer if service is required.
on page 2-22 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained
from your retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Power Steering Fluid (Saturn Part
No. 21007583 or GM Part No. U.S.
89021184, in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Power Steering
System
Automatic
Transaxle
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Engine Oil
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (Saturn
Part No. 21038869 or GM Part No.
Latch, Pivots, U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Spring Anchor or lubricant meeting requirements of
and Release NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Pawl
page 5-13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only
Hood, Trunk
and Door
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (Saturn
Part No. 21038869 or GM Part No.
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
Windshield
Washer Solvent
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Sunroof Track U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Parking Brake 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Cable Guides lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.
Part
Saturn Part Number
90571362
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
—
—
21018826
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
52493319
—
09195166
FLR9LTE*
Wiper Blade (Hook Type)
Front – 22.0 inches (56.0 cm)
Rear – 13.0 Inches (33.0 cm)
—
8–2221
—
09152402
*Bosch Part Number
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance,
contact the Saturn Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact the Saturn
Customer Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A Saturn Customer Assistance Center team member will
handle your call and assist in providing product and
warranty information, the nearest retailer location,
roadside assistance, brochures, literature and discuss
any concerns you may have.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed
to providing our customers with unparalleled service,
before, during and after the purchase of a Saturn
vehicle, for total customer satisfaction. We call this the
Saturn Difference. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your retailer’s sales or service departments.
If, for any reason, your ownership experience falls
below your expectations, we suggest you take
the following action:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number. This 17-digit number
can be found on the vehicle registration or title, on
the upper driver’s side corner of the dash, or on
your roadside assistance key card.
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance
Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has
the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you wish to write to the Saturn Customer Assistance
Center, our address is:
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
This program is available at no cost to you, our customer.
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24 Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
We ask that you not resort to BBB Auto Line until after
Saturn and its retailers have been given the opportunity
to satisfy your vehicle concerns. However, U.S. residents
may file a claim at any time by contacting your local
Better Business Bureau at 1-800-955-5100.
In Canada, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
When contacting Saturn, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
STEP THREE: Both Saturn and its retailers are
committed to making sure you are completely satisfied
with your Saturn vehicle. However, if you continue to
remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined
in Steps One and Two, Saturn and its retailers offer the
additional assistance of a neutral party through our
voluntary participation in a mediation/arbitration program
called BBB Auto Line. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet,
located in the front cover pocket of your owner’s
handbook, for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using
the toll-free telephone number or by writing them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle
age, mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation
reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturn
has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices
for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer
Assistance Center.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer who has
access to a TDD or to a conventional Text Telephone
(TTY) can communicate with Saturn by dialing
1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may dial
1-800-263-3830.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As the proud owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside Assistance
Program. This value-added service is intended to provide
you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel
the open road. Saturn’s Roadside Assistance toll-free
number is staffed by courteous and capable Roadside
Assistance Representatives who are available 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle such as hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period at no expense
to you:
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users
in Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest Saturn
retailer for warranty service or in the event of
a vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
For vehicles purchased in the U.S. call 1-800-553-6000
(TTY: 1-800-833-6000).
For vehicles purchased in Canada call 1-800-268-6800.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember we are only a phone call
away. Saturn Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000;
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.)
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
Saturn reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Saturn’s
judgment, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Saturn Retailer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Saturn reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representatives:
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Saturn
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery
date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called
event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to engine
speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. This information has been
used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be
used to improve crash performance of future vehicles
and driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not record sounds,
such as conversation of vehicle occupants.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
Saturn Corporation.
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your retailer or
Saturn Corporation.
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
U.S. customers can call the Saturn Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-553-6000, or write:
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263–1999.
Or, write to:
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your
Saturn retailer.
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Bulletins
Service Manuals
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors
product performance in the field. We then prepare
bulletins for servicing our products better. You can
get these bulletins, too.
A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn
service manuals are written for trained technicians, and
in some cases, specialized tools and equipment are
necessary to complete certain repairs. However,
the manuals are available to owners who either have
the training, or wish to gain a greater understanding of
the technical aspect of their Saturn.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the
proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs
which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs.
For additional publications information or to order
publications, call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
win.wallace.com/saturn to order on-line.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new
or unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker way
to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician service
your vehicle better.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by
calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
Owner Publications
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
technician may have to determine if a specific
bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,
call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
win.wallace.com/saturn to order on-line.
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as
described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states
and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and light
trucks with a GVWR less than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg).
Copies of individual bulletins are also at your participating
Saturn retailer. You can ask to see them.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ................................... 1-41
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-13
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses (cont.)
F
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-42
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
Locks (cont.)
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
